]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
2010-04-05 Kai Tietz <kai.tietz@onevision.com>
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8
NC
4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
252b5132
RH
42@ifinfo
43@format
44START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
46END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
47@end format
48@end ifinfo
49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
0e9517a9 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
903249d7 962002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
cd6d6c15
NC
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
5fa222e4
AM
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
cd6d6c15
NC
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
cd6d6c15
NC
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
6aa29e7b
JJ
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
24718e3b
L
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
cd6d6c15
NC
1095@end table
1096
ece2d90e 1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
69da35b5
NC
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1124recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1130
4a43e768
AM
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1139needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
e56f61be
L
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1154
252b5132
RH
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1171
a1ab1d2a
UD
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1179
252b5132
RH
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1184@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1197libraries.
252b5132
RH
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
55255dae
L
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
40b36307
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
0b8a70d9
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1243@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
252b5132 1253
ddbb8a31
NC
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary. With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
252b5132
RH
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
ea20a7da
CC
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
2509a395
SL
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1416@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1424necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1428@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1429@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1430@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1435libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1436
aa713662
L
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
b79e8c78 1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
903249d7
NC
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
b79e8c78 1477
31941635
L
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
3e3b46e5
PB
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1493
252b5132
RH
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1500errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
fe7929ce
AM
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
0a9c1c8e
CD
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
252b5132 1528@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1534object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
36af4a4e
JJ
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
252b5132
RH
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1567@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1568@item --relax
28d5f677 1569@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1570An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1579@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
252b5132 1589
28d5f677
NC
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
28d5f677
NC
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1633@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1638them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1641@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
ff5dcc92 1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1647@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1651file systems.
252b5132 1652
ff5dcc92 1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1655the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1669explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1670specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
28c309a2
NC
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
252b5132 1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1681libraries:
252b5132
RH
1682@enumerate
1683@item
ff5dcc92 1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1685@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1703@item
ec4eb78a
L
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
252b5132
RH
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
252b5132 1729@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1739
2509a395
SL
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
2509a395
SL
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1767many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
2509a395 1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
252b5132
RH
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1789symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1792trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
560e09e9
NC
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1831
1832@item report-all
da8bce14 1833Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
252b5132
RH
1854@kindex --verbose
1855@cindex verbose
1856@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1857@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1859supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1860the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1861
1862@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1863@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1864@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1865Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1866used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1867about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1868is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1869see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1870use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1871symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1872@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1873
7ce691ae 1874@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1875@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1876@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1877@item --warn-common
1878Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1879a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1880but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1881you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1882Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1883warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1884
1885There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1886
1887@table @samp
1888@item int i = 1;
1889A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1890file.
1891
1892@item extern int i;
1893An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1894There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1895variable somewhere.
1896
1897@item int i;
1898A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1899variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1900The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1901single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1902size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1903a definition of the same variable.
1904@end table
1905
1906The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1907Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1908just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1909encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1910a common symbol.
1911
1912@enumerate
1913@item
1914Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1915definition for the symbol.
1916@smallexample
1917@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1918 overridden by definition
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1920@end smallexample
1921
1922@item
1923Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1924the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1925except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1926@smallexample
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1928 overriding common
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1930@end smallexample
1931
1932@item
1933Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1936 of `@var{symbol}'
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1944 overridden by larger common
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1950the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1951encountered in a different order.
1952@smallexample
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1954 overriding smaller common
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1956@end smallexample
1957@end enumerate
1958
1959@kindex --warn-constructors
1960@item --warn-constructors
1961Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1962object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1963detect the use of global constructors.
1964
1965@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1966@item --warn-multiple-gp
1967Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1968This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1969Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1970section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1971of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1972base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1973base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1974bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1975large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1976values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1977option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1978
1979@kindex --warn-once
1980@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1981@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1982@item --warn-once
1983Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1984which refers to it.
1985
1986@kindex --warn-section-align
1987@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1988@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1989@item --warn-section-align
1990Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1991alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1992The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1993is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1994the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1995
8fdd7217
NC
1996@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1997@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1998Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1999
a0c402a5
L
2000@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2001@item --warn-alternate-em
2002Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2003
560e09e9
NC
2004@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2005@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2007@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2008This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2009
2010@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2011@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2012This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2013it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2014
252b5132
RH
2015@kindex --whole-archive
2016@cindex including an entire archive
2017@item --whole-archive
2018For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2019@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2020in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2021files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2022library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2023library. This option may be used more than once.
2024
7ec229ce 2025Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2026about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2027Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2028list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2029your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2030
2509a395
SL
2031@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2032@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2033Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2034@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2035undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2036@var{symbol}.
2037
2038This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2039wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2040wishes to call the system function, it should call
2041@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2042
2043Here is a trivial example:
2044
2045@smallexample
2046void *
cc2f008e 2047__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2048@{
cc2f008e 2049 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2050 return __real_malloc (c);
2051@}
2052@end smallexample
2053
ff5dcc92 2054If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2055all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2056instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2057call the real @code{malloc} function.
2058
2059You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2060links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2061you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2062file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2063call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2064
6aa29e7b
JJ
2065@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2066@item --eh-frame-hdr
2067Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2068@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2069
6c1439be
L
2070@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2071@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2072@item --enable-new-dtags
2073@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2074This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2075systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2076@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2077If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2078created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2079those options are only available for ELF systems.
2080
2d643429 2081@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2082@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2083Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2084close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2085time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2086increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2087value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2088
fdc90cb4
JJ
2089@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2090@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2091Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2092@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2093new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2094the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2095hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2096
35835446
JR
2097@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2098@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2099This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2100linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2101for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2102about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2103
4f9c04f7 2104Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21051021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2106run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2107has been used.
2108
2109The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2110enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2111
c0065db7
RM
2112@kindex --build-id
2113@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2114@item --build-id
2115@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2116Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2117The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2118file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2119@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2120parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2121@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2122@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2123an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2124characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2125omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2126
2127The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2128that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2129unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2130to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2131file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2132string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2133
2134Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2135@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2136@end table
2137
0285c67d
NC
2138@c man end
2139
36f63dca 2140@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2141
0285c67d
NC
2142@c man begin OPTIONS
2143
ff5dcc92 2144The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2145the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2146normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2147use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2148@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2149like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2150symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2151object file).
2152
2153In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2154support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2155PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2156values by either a space or an equals sign.
2157
ff5dcc92 2158@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2159
2160@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2161@item --add-stdcall-alias
2162If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2163as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2164[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2165
2166@kindex --base-file
2167@item --base-file @var{file}
2168Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2169addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2170@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2171[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2172
2173@kindex --dll
2174@item --dll
2175Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2176@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2177file.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2179
88183869
DK
2180@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2181@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2182@item --enable-long-section-names
2183@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2184The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2185the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2186for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2187fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2188to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2189allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2190disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2191generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2192as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2193with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2194GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2195information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2196option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2197section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2198when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2199image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2200[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2201
252b5132
RH
2202@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2203@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2204@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2205@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2206If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2207do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2208only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2209resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2210undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2211@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2212to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2213warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2214import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2215to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2216feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2217@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2218mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2219[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2220
2221@cindex DLLs, creating
2222@kindex --export-all-symbols
2223@item --export-all-symbols
2224If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2225be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2226otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2227explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2228attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2229option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2230@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2231@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2232exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2233re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2234such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2235@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2236@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2237Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2238not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2239extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2240(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2241These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2242@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2243@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2244@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2245@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2246[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2247
2248@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2249@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2250Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2251exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2252[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2253
2927aaca
NC
2254@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2255@item --exclude-all-symbols
2256Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2257[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2258
252b5132
RH
2259@kindex --file-alignment
2260@item --file-alignment
2261Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2262file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2263512.
bb10df36 2264[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2265
2266@cindex heap size
2267@kindex --heap
2268@item --heap @var{reserve}
2269@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2270Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2271to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2272committed.
bb10df36 2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2274
2275@cindex image base
2276@kindex --image-base
2277@item --image-base @var{value}
2278Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2279the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2280is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2281your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2282other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2283for dlls.
bb10df36 2284[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2285
2286@kindex --kill-at
2287@item --kill-at
2288If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2289symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2290[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2291
26d2d8a2
BF
2292@kindex --large-address-aware
2293@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2294If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2295header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2296greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2297or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2298section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2299[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2300
252b5132
RH
2301@kindex --major-image-version
2302@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2303Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2304[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2305
2306@kindex --major-os-version
2307@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2308Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2309[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2310
2311@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2312@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2313Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@kindex --minor-image-version
2317@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2318Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2319[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2320
2321@kindex --minor-os-version
2322@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2323Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2324[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2325
2326@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2327@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2328Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2329[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2330
2331@cindex DEF files, creating
2332@cindex DLLs, creating
2333@kindex --output-def
2334@item --output-def @var{file}
2335The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2336file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2337(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2338library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2339automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2341
b044cda1
CW
2342@cindex DLLs, creating
2343@kindex --out-implib
2344@item --out-implib @var{file}
2345The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2346import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2347import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2348may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2349makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2350creation step.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2352
2353@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2354@item --enable-auto-image-base
2355Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2356using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2357from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2358collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2359avoided.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2361
2362@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2363@item --disable-auto-image-base
2364Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2365user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2366default.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2368
2369@cindex DLLs, linking to
2370@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2371@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2372When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2373search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2374@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2375between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2376uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2377@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2378[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2379
2380@kindex --enable-auto-import
2381@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2382Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2383DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2384building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2385'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2386to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2387specification published by Microsoft.
2388
e2a83dd0
NC
2389Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2390data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2391placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2392around a problem with consts that is described here:
2393http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2394
4d8907ac
DS
2395Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2396see this message:
0d888aac 2397
ece2d90e 2398"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2399documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2400
ece2d90e
NC
2401This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2402ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2403allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2404fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2405constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2406multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2407this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2408of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2409the warning, and exit.
2410
2411There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2412data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2413
2fa9fc65
NC
2414One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2415of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2416this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2417
c0065db7
RM
2418A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2419that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2420there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2421a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2422
2423@example
2424extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2425extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2426 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2427@end example
2428
2429or
2430
2431@example
2432extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2433extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2434 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2435@end example
2436
c0065db7 2437For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2438is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2439
2440@example
2441extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2442extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2443 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2444@end example
2445
c406afaf
NC
2446or
2447
2448@example
2449extern long long extern_ll;
2450extern_ll -->
2451 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2452@end example
2453
2fa9fc65 2454A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2455'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2456@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2457requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2458building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2459merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2460between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2461constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2462
2463Original:
2464@example
2465--foo.h
2466extern int arr[];
2467--foo.c
2468#include "foo.h"
2469void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2470 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2471@}
2472@end example
2473
2474Solution 1:
2475@example
2476--foo.h
2477extern int arr[];
2478--foo.c
2479#include "foo.h"
2480void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2481 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2482 volatile int *parr = arr;
2483 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2484@}
2485@end example
2486
2487Solution 2:
2488@example
2489--foo.h
2490/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2491#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2492 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2493#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2494#else
2495#define FOO_IMPORT
2496#endif
2497extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2498--foo.c
2499#include "foo.h"
2500void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2501 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2502@}
2503@end example
2504
c0065db7 2505A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2506library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2507for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2508functions).
bb10df36 2509[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2510
2511@kindex --disable-auto-import
2512@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2513Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2514@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2515[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2516
2fa9fc65
NC
2517@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2518@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2519If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2520that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2521a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2522environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2524
2525@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2526@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2528DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2529[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2530
b044cda1
CW
2531@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2532@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2533Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2534[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2535
252b5132
RH
2536@kindex --section-alignment
2537@item --section-alignment
2538Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2539addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2540[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2541
2542@cindex stack size
2543@kindex --stack
2544@item --stack @var{reserve}
2545@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2546Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2547to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2548committed.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@kindex --subsystem
2552@item --subsystem @var{which}
2553@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2554@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2555Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2556legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2557@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2558the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2559@var{which}.
bb10df36 2560[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2561
2f563b51
DK
2562The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2563of the PE file header:
2564[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2565
2566@kindex --dynamicbase
2567@item --dynamicbase
2568The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2569randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2570Vista for i386 PE targets.
2571
2572@kindex --forceinteg
2573@item --forceinteg
2574Code integrity checks are enforced.
2575
2576@kindex --nxcompat
2577@item --nxcompat
2578The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2579This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2580
2581@kindex --no-isolation
2582@item --no-isolation
2583Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2584
2585@kindex --no-seh
2586@item --no-seh
2587The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2588this image.
2589
2590@kindex --no-bind
2591@item --no-bind
2592Do not bind this image.
2593
2594@kindex --wdmdriver
2595@item --wdmdriver
2596The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2597
2598@kindex --tsaware
2599@item --tsaware
2600The image is Terminal Server aware.
2601
252b5132
RH
2602@end table
2603
0285c67d
NC
2604@c man end
2605
93fd0973
SC
2606@ifset M68HC11
2607@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2608
2609@c man begin OPTIONS
2610
2611The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2612memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2613
2614@table @gcctabopt
2615
2616@kindex --no-trampoline
2617@item --no-trampoline
2618This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2619is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2620instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2621
2622@kindex --bank-window
2623@item --bank-window @var{name}
2624This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2625the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2626The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2627paging and addresses within the memory window.
2628
2629@end table
2630
2631@c man end
2632@end ifset
2633
7fb9f789
NC
2634@ifset M68K
2635@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2636
2637@c man begin OPTIONS
2638
2639The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2640when linking for 68K targets.
2641
2642@table @gcctabopt
2643
2644@kindex --got
2645@item --got=@var{type}
2646This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2647@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2648@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2649Info entry for @file{ld}.
2650
2651@end table
2652
2653@c man end
2654@end ifset
2655
252b5132
RH
2656@ifset UsesEnvVars
2657@node Environment
2658@section Environment Variables
2659
0285c67d
NC
2660@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2661
560e09e9 2662You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2663@ifclear SingleFormat
2664@code{GNUTARGET},
2665@end ifclear
2666@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2667
36f63dca 2668@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2669@kindex GNUTARGET
2670@cindex default input format
2671@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2672use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2673of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2674@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2675of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2676attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2677this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2678there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2679object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2680BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2681in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2682@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2683
2684@kindex LDEMULATION
2685@cindex default emulation
2686@cindex emulation, default
2687@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2688@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2689behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2690available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2691the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2692variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2693linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2694
2695@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2696@cindex demangling, default
2697Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2698@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2699default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2700a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2701may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2702options.
2703
0285c67d
NC
2704@c man end
2705@end ifset
2706
252b5132
RH
2707@node Scripts
2708@chapter Linker Scripts
2709
2710@cindex scripts
2711@cindex linker scripts
2712@cindex command files
2713Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2714written in the linker command language.
2715
2716The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2717the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2718the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2719more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2720direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2721described below.
2722
2723The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2724yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2725linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2726to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2727such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2728
2729You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2730line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2731default linker script.
2732
2733You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2734to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2735Linker Scripts}.
2736
2737@menu
2738* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2739* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2740* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2741* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2742* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2743* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2744* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2745* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2746* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2747* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2748* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2749@end menu
2750
2751@node Basic Script Concepts
2752@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2753@cindex linker script concepts
2754We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2755describe the linker script language.
2756
2757The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2758file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2759@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2760The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2761purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2762among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2763section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2764in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2765
2766Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2767also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2768contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2769the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2770A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2771area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2772loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2773which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2774of debugging information.
2775
2776Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2777first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2778the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2779@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2780section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2781same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2782is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2783(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2784based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2785RAM address would be the VMA.
2786
2787You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2788program with the @samp{-h} option.
2789
2790Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2791@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2792has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2793information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2794will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2795static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2796referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2797
2798You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2799program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2800option.
2801
2802@node Script Format
2803@section Linker Script Format
2804@cindex linker script format
2805Linker scripts are text files.
2806
2807You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2808either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2809symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2810generally ignored.
2811
2812Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2813If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2814otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2815double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2816file name.
2817
2818You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2819@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2820to whitespace.
2821
2822@node Simple Example
2823@section Simple Linker Script Example
2824@cindex linker script example
2825@cindex example of linker script
2826Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2827
2828The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2829@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2830memory layout of the output file.
2831
2832The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2833describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2834code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2835@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2836Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2837your input files.
2838
2839For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28400x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2841linker script which will do that:
2842@smallexample
2843SECTIONS
2844@{
2845 . = 0x10000;
2846 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2847 . = 0x8000000;
2848 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2849 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2850@}
2851@end smallexample
2852
2853You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2854followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2855descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2856
252b5132
RH
2857The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2858sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2859counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2860other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2861current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2862incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2863@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2864
2865The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2866required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2867after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2868which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2869wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2870means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2871
2872Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2873@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2874@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2875
2876The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2877the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2878at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2879output section, the value of the location counter will be
2880@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2881effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2882immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2883
2884The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2885alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2886example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2887sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2888may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2889sections.
2890
2891That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2892
2893@node Simple Commands
2894@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2895@cindex linker script simple commands
2896In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2897
2898@menu
2899* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2900* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2901@ifclear SingleFormat
2902* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2903@end ifclear
2904
4a93e180 2905* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2906* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2907@end menu
2908
2909@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2910@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2911@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2912@cindex start of execution
2913@cindex first instruction
2914@cindex entry point
2915The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2916point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2917entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2918@smallexample
2919ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2920@end smallexample
2921
2922There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2923entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2924stopping when one of them succeeds:
2925@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2926@item
252b5132 2927the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2928@item
252b5132 2929the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2930@item
3ab904c4
NC
2931the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2932targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2933check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2934@item
252b5132 2935the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2936@item
252b5132
RH
2937The address @code{0}.
2938@end itemize
2939
2940@node File Commands
36f63dca 2941@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2942@cindex linker script file commands
2943Several linker script commands deal with files.
2944
2945@table @code
2946@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2947@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2948@cindex including a linker script
2949Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2950be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2951with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
295210 levels deep.
2953
4006703d
NS
2954You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2955@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2956
252b5132
RH
2957@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2958@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2959@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2960@cindex input files in linker scripts
2961@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2962@cindex linker script input object files
2963The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2964in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2965
2966For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2967a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2968then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2969
2970In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2971script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2972
e3f2db7f
AO
2973In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2974with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2975located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2976for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2977open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2978linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2979description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2980
ff5dcc92 2981If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2982name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2983@samp{-l}.
2984
2985When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2986files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2987script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2988
2989@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2990@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2991@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2992@cindex grouping input files
2993The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2994files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2995new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2996in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2997
b717d30e
JJ
2998@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2999@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3000@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3001This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3002commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3003as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3004with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3005when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3006@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3007and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3008setting afterwards.
3009
252b5132
RH
3010@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3011@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3012@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3013The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3014@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3015@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3016Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3017precedence.
3018
3019You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3020output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3021
3022@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3023@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3024@cindex library search path in linker script
3025@cindex archive search path in linker script
3026@cindex search path in linker script
3027The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3028@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3029@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3030on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3031are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3032the command line option are searched first.
3033
3034@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3035@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3036@cindex first input file
3037The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3038that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3039though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3040when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3041first file.
3042@end table
3043
3044@ifclear SingleFormat
3045@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3046@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3047A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3048
3049@table @code
3050@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3051@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3052@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3053@cindex output file format in linker script
3054The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3055output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3056exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3057(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3058line option takes precedence.
3059
3060You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3061formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3062This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3063desired endianness.
3064
3065If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3066will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3067output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3068used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3069
3070For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3071command:
3072@smallexample
3073OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3074@end smallexample
3075This says that the default format for the output file is
3076@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3077option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3078format.
3079
3080@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3081@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3082@cindex input file format in linker script
3083The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3084files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3085This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3086(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3087is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3088command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3089@end table
3090@end ifclear
3091
4a93e180
NC
3092@node REGION_ALIAS
3093@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3094@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3095@cindex region alias
3096@cindex region names
3097
3098Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3099@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3100
3101@smallexample
3102REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3103@end smallexample
3104
3105The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3106memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3107to memory regions. An example follows.
3108
3109Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3110memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3111that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3112non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3113access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3114read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3115sections:
3116
3117@itemize @bullet
3118@item
3119@code{.text} program code;
3120@item
3121@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3122@item
3123@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3124@item
3125@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3126@end itemize
3127
3128The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3129part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3130output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3131systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3132@code{C}:
3133@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3134@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3135@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3136@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3137@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3138@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3139@end multitable
3140The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3141loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3142the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3143the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3144
3145The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3146includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3147memory layout:
3148@smallexample
3149INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3150
3151SECTIONS
3152 @{
3153 .text :
3154 @{
3155 *(.text)
3156 @} > REGION_TEXT
3157 .rodata :
3158 @{
3159 *(.rodata)
3160 rodata_end = .;
3161 @} > REGION_RODATA
3162 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3163 @{
3164 data_start = .;
3165 *(.data)
3166 @} > REGION_DATA
3167 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3168 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3169 .bss :
3170 @{
3171 *(.bss)
3172 @} > REGION_BSS
3173 @}
3174@end smallexample
3175
3176Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3177regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3178variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3179@table @code
3180@item A
3181Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3182@smallexample
3183MEMORY
3184 @{
3185 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3186 @}
3187
3188REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3189REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3190REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3191REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3192@end smallexample
3193@item B
3194Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3195into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3196@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3197@smallexample
3198MEMORY
3199 @{
3200 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3201 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3202 @}
3203
3204REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3205REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3206REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3207REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3208@end smallexample
3209@item C
3210Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3211@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3212initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3213system start into the @code{RAM}.
3214@smallexample
3215MEMORY
3216 @{
3217 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3218 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3219 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3220 @}
3221
3222REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3223REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3224REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3225REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3226@end smallexample
3227@end table
3228
3229It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3230@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3231necessary:
3232@smallexample
3233#include <string.h>
3234
3235extern char data_start [];
3236extern char data_size [];
3237extern char data_load_start [];
3238
3239void copy_data(void)
3240@{
3241 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3242 @{
3243 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3244 @}
3245@}
3246@end smallexample
3247
252b5132 3248@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3249@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3250There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3251
3252@table @code
3253@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3254@kindex ASSERT
3255@cindex assertion in linker script
3256Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3257with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3258
3259@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3260@kindex EXTERN
3261@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3262Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3263symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3264modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3265each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3266command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3267
3268@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3269@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3270@cindex common allocation in linker script
3271This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3272to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3273output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3274
4818e05f
AM
3275@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3276@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3277@cindex common allocation in linker script
3278This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3279command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3280to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3281
53d25da6
AM
3282@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3283@kindex INSERT
3284@cindex insert user script into default script
3285This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3286augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3287inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3288@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3289default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3290sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3291linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3292insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3293linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3294default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3295of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3296to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3297is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3298
3299@smallexample
3300SECTIONS
3301@{
3302 OVERLAY :
3303 @{
3304 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3305 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3306 @}
3307@}
3308INSERT AFTER .text;
3309@end smallexample
3310
252b5132
RH
3311@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3312@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3313@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3314This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3315references among certain output sections.
3316
3317In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3318using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3319will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3320errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3321a function defined in the other section.
3322
3323The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3324@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3325an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3326@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3327names.
3328
3329@ifclear SingleFormat
3330@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3331@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3332@cindex machine architecture
3333@cindex architecture
3334Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3335of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3336architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3337the @samp{-f} option.
3338@end ifclear
3339@end table
3340
3341@node Assignments
3342@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3343@cindex assignment in scripts
3344@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3345@cindex variables, defining
3346You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3347the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3348
3349@menu
3350* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3351* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3352* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3353* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3354@end menu
3355
3356@node Simple Assignments
3357@subsection Simple Assignments
3358
3359You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3360
3361@table @code
3362@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3363@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3364@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3365@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3366@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3367@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3368@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3369@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3370@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3371@end table
3372
3373The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3374@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3375defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3376
3377The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3378may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3379
3380The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3381
3382Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3383
3384You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3385statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3386section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3387
3388The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3389expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3390
3391Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3392assignments may be used:
3393
3394@smallexample
3395floating_point = 0;
3396SECTIONS
3397@{
3398 .text :
3399 @{
3400 *(.text)
3401 _etext = .;
3402 @}
156e34dd 3403 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3404 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3405@}
3406@end smallexample
3407@noindent
3408In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3409zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3410the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3411defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3412upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3413
3414@node PROVIDE
3415@subsection PROVIDE
3416@cindex PROVIDE
3417In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3418only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3419the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3420@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3421@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3422@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3423@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3424@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3425
3426Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3427@smallexample
3428SECTIONS
3429@{
3430 .text :
3431 @{
3432 *(.text)
3433 _etext = .;
3434 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3435 @}
3436@}
3437@end smallexample
3438
3439In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3440underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3441the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3442underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3443If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3444linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3445
7af8e998
L
3446@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3447@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3448@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3449Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3450hidden and won't be exported.
3451
73ae6183
NC
3452@node Source Code Reference
3453@subsection Source Code Reference
3454
3455Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3456intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3457a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3458symbol that does not have a value.
3459
3460Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3461transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3462stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3463prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3464mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3465of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3466variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3467linker script variable might be referred to as:
3468
3469@smallexample
3470 extern int foo;
3471@end smallexample
3472
3473But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3474
3475@smallexample
3476 _foo = 1000;
3477@end smallexample
3478
3479In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3480transformation has taken place.
3481
3482When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3483things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3484in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3485second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3486table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3487contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3488value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3489
3490@smallexample
3491 int foo = 1000;
3492@end smallexample
3493
3494creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3495holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3496number 1000 is initially stored.
3497
3498When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3499first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3500memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3501So:
3502
3503@smallexample
3504 foo = 1;
3505@end smallexample
3506
3507looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3508associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3509address. Whereas:
3510
3511@smallexample
3512 int * a = & foo;
3513@end smallexample
3514
3515looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3516and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3517the variable @samp{a}.
3518
3519Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3520the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3521an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3522
3523@smallexample
3524 foo = 1000;
3525@end smallexample
3526
3527creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3528the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3529address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3530linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3531access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3532
3533Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3534you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3535use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3536section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3537linker script contains these declarations:
3538
3539@smallexample
3540@group
3541 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3542 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3543 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3544@end group
3545@end smallexample
3546
3547Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3548
3549@smallexample
3550@group
3551 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3552
73ae6183
NC
3553 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3554@end group
3555@end smallexample
3556
3557Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3558
252b5132 3559@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3560@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3561@kindex SECTIONS
3562The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3563into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3564
3565The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3566@smallexample
3567SECTIONS
3568@{
3569 @var{sections-command}
3570 @var{sections-command}
3571 @dots{}
3572@}
3573@end smallexample
3574
3575Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3576
3577@itemize @bullet
3578@item
3579an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3580@item
3581a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3582@item
3583an output section description
3584@item
3585an overlay description
3586@end itemize
3587
3588The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3589@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3590those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3591understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3592the layout of the output file.
3593
3594Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3595below.
3596
3597If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3598linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3599section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3600input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3601example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3602in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3603
3604@menu
3605* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3606* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3607* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3608* Input Section:: Input section description
3609* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3610* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3611* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3612* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3613* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3614@end menu
3615
3616@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3617@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3618The full description of an output section looks like this:
3619@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3620@group
7e7d5768 3621@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3622 [AT(@var{lma})]
3623 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3624 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3625 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3626 @{
3627 @var{output-section-command}
3628 @var{output-section-command}
3629 @dots{}
562d3460 3630 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3631@end group
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3635
3636The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3637name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3638The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3639
3640Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3641
3642@itemize @bullet
3643@item
3644a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3645@item
3646an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3647@item
3648data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3649@item
3650a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3651@end itemize
3652
3653@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3654@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3655@cindex name, section
3656@cindex section name
3657The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3658meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3659support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3660must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3661example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3662output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3663names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3664quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3665characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3666commas must be quoted.
3667
3668The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3669Discarding}.
3670
3671@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3672@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3673@cindex address, section
3674@cindex section address
3675The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3676address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3677the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3678based on the current value of the location counter.
3679
3680If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3681set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3682@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3683current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3684requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3685output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3686within the output section.
3687
3688For example,
3689@smallexample
3690.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3691@end smallexample
3692@noindent
3693and
3694@smallexample
3695.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3696@end smallexample
3697@noindent
3698are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3699@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3700counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3701counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3702section.
3703
3704The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3705For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3706so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3707do something like this:
3708@smallexample
3709.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3710@end smallexample
3711@noindent
3712This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3713aligned upward to the specified value.
3714
3715Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3716location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3717sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3718
3719@node Input Section
36f63dca 3720@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3721@cindex input sections
3722@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3723The most common output section command is an input section description.
3724
3725The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3726You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3727in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3728map the input files into your memory layout.
3729
3730@menu
3731* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3732* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3733* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3734* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3735* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3736@end menu
3737
3738@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3739@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3740@cindex input section basics
3741An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3742by a list of section names in parentheses.
3743
3744The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3745describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3746
3747The most common input section description is to include all input
3748sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3749include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3750@smallexample
3751*(.text)
3752@end smallexample
3753@noindent
18625d54
CM
3754Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3755of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3756match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3757example:
252b5132 3758@smallexample
b4346c09 3759*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3760@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3761will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3762@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3763
3764There are two ways to include more than one section:
3765@smallexample
3766*(.text .rdata)
3767*(.text) *(.rdata)
3768@end smallexample
3769@noindent
3770The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3771@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3772first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3773they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3774@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3775@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3776
3777You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3778You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3779needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3780@smallexample
3781data.o(.data)
3782@end smallexample
3783
967928e9
AM
3784You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3785matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3786with no whitespace around the colon.
3787
3788@table @samp
3789@item archive:file
3790matches file within archive
3791@item archive:
3792matches the whole archive
3793@item :file
3794matches file but not one in an archive
3795@end table
3796
3797Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3798wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3799single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3800@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3801within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3802also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3803other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3804from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3805command.
3806
252b5132
RH
3807If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3808the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3809commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3810@smallexample
3811data.o
3812@end smallexample
3813
967928e9
AM
3814When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3815and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3816characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3817name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3818did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3819though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3820@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3821the archive search path.
3822
3823@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3824@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3825@cindex input section wildcards
3826@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3827@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3828@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3829In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3830name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3831
3832The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3833pattern for the file name.
3834
3835The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3836
3837@table @samp
3838@item *
3839matches any number of characters
3840@item ?
3841matches any single character
3842@item [@var{chars}]
3843matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3844character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3845@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3846@item \
3847quotes the following character
3848@end table
3849
3850When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3851will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3852Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3853exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3854@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3855a @samp{/} character.
3856
3857File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3858specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3859does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3860
3861If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3862appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3863will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3864sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3865@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3866@smallexample
3867.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3868.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3869@end smallexample
3870
bcaa7b3e 3871@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3872Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3873in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3874this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3875pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3876@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3877into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3878
bcaa7b3e
L
3879@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3880@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3881difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3882ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3883
3884@cindex SORT
3885@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3886
3887When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3888can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3889
3890@enumerate
3891@item
3892@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3893It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3894sections have the same name.
3895@item
3896@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3897It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3898sections have the same alignment.
3899@item
c0065db7 3900@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3901treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3902@item
3903@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3904is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3905@item
3906All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3907@end enumerate
3908
3909When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3910section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3911takes precedence over the command line option.
3912
3913If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3914command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3915treated as nested sorting command.
3916
3917@enumerate
3918@item
3919@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3920@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3921@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3922@item
3923@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3924@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3925@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3926@end enumerate
3927
3928If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3929command line option will be ignored.
3930
252b5132
RH
3931If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3932@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3933precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3934
3935This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3936files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3937sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3938The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3939with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3940linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3941@smallexample
3942@group
3943SECTIONS @{
3944 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3945 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3946 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3947 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3948@}
3949@end group
3950@end smallexample
3951
3952@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3953@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3954@cindex common symbol placement
3955@cindex uninitialized data placement
3956A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3957file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3958linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3959named @samp{COMMON}.
3960
3961You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3962other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3963particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3964input files are placed in another section.
3965
3966In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3967@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3968@smallexample
3969.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3970@end smallexample
3971
3972@cindex scommon section
3973@cindex small common symbols
3974Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3975example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3976symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3977different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3978the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3979symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3980to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3981locations.
3982
3983@cindex [COMMON]
3984You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3985notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3986@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3987
3988@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3989@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3990@cindex KEEP
3991@cindex garbage collection
3992When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3993it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3994This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3995with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3996@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3997
3998@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3999@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4000The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4001to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4002start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4003@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4004follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4005@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4006@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4007All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4008files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4009
4010@smallexample
4011@group
4012SECTIONS @{
4013 outputa 0x10000 :
4014 @{
4015 all.o
4016 foo.o (.input1)
4017 @}
36f63dca
NC
4018@end group
4019@group
252b5132
RH
4020 outputb :
4021 @{
4022 foo.o (.input2)
4023 foo1.o (.input1)
4024 @}
36f63dca
NC
4025@end group
4026@group
252b5132
RH
4027 outputc :
4028 @{
4029 *(.input1)
4030 *(.input2)
4031 @}
4032@}
4033@end group
a1ab1d2a 4034@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4035
4036@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4037@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4038@cindex data
4039@cindex section data
4040@cindex output section data
4041@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4042@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4043@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4044@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4045@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4046You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4047@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4048an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4049parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4050value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4051counter.
4052
4053The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4054store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4055bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4056stored.
4057
4058For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4059of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4060@smallexample
4061BYTE(1)
4062LONG(addr)
4063@end smallexample
4064
4065When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4066same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4067target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4068@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4069@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4070
4071If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4072which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4073When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4074true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4075endianness of the first input object file.
4076
36f63dca 4077Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4078between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4079@smallexample
4080SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4081@end smallexample
4082whereas this will work:
4083@smallexample
4084SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4085@end smallexample
4086
252b5132
RH
4087@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4088@cindex holes, filling
4089@cindex unspecified memory
4090You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4091current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4092otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4093gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4094with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4095necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4096point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4097than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4098different parts of an output section.
4099
4100This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4101value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4102@smallexample
563e308f 4103FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4104@end smallexample
4105
4106The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4107section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4108part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4109entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4110precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4111expression.
252b5132
RH
4112
4113@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4114@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4115There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4116commands.
4117
4118@table @code
4119@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4120@cindex input filename symbols
4121@cindex filename symbols
4122@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4123The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4124The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4125file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4126the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4127
4128This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4129normally used for any other object file format.
4130
4131@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4132@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4133@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4134@item CONSTRUCTORS
4135When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4136unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4137destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4138arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4139automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4140For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4141linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4142@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4143ignored for other object file formats.
4144
4145The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4146constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4147Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4148the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4149first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4150of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4151compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4152formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4153@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4154the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4155destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4156@code{exit}.
4157
4158For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4159arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4160addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4161and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4162linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4163runtime code expects to see.
4164
4165@smallexample
4166 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4167 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4168 *(.ctors)
4169 LONG(0)
4170 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4171 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4172 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4173 *(.dtors)
4174 LONG(0)
4175 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4176@end smallexample
4177
4178If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4179which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4180are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4181are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4182command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4183@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4184@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4185@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4186
4187Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4188and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4189need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4190scripts.
4191
4192@end table
4193
4194@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4195@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4196@cindex discarding sections
4197@cindex sections, discarding
4198@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4199The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4200for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4201be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4202@smallexample
49c13adb 4203.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4204@end smallexample
4205@noindent
4206will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4207@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4208sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4209space in an output section will also create the output section.
4210
a0976ea4 4211The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4212on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4213symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4214the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4215section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4216
4217@cindex /DISCARD/
4218The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4219input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4220section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4221
4222@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4223@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4224@cindex output section attributes
4225We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4226like this:
0c71d759 4227
252b5132 4228@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4229@group
7e7d5768 4230@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4231 [AT(@var{lma})]
4232 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4233 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4234 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4235 @{
4236 @var{output-section-command}
4237 @var{output-section-command}
4238 @dots{}
562d3460 4239 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4240@end group
4241@end smallexample
0c71d759 4242
252b5132
RH
4243We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4244@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4245remaining section attributes.
4246
a1ab1d2a 4247@menu
252b5132
RH
4248* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4249* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4250* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4251* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4252* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4253* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4254* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4255* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4256@end menu
4257
4258@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4259@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4260Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4261parentheses. The following types are defined:
4262
4263@table @code
4264@item NOLOAD
4265The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4266loaded into memory when the program is run.
4267@item DSECT
4268@itemx COPY
4269@itemx INFO
4270@itemx OVERLAY
4271These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4272rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4273marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4274section when the program is run.
4275@end table
4276
4277@kindex NOLOAD
4278@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4279@cindex loading, preventing
4280The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4281the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4282the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4283@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4284need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
4285@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
4286@smallexample
4287@group
4288SECTIONS @{
4289 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4290 @dots{}
4291@}
4292@end group
4293@end smallexample
4294
4295@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4296@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4297@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4298@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4299@cindex load address
4300@cindex section load address
4301Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4302@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
4303an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
4304Address}).
4305
dc0b6aa0
AM
4306The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
4307the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
4308
4309Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
4310specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
4311Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
4312linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4313
4314If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4315section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
4316VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
4317section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
4318or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
4319to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 4320@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
4321
4322@cindex ROM initialized data
4323@cindex initialized data in ROM
4324This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4325example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4326called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4327@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4328even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4329uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4330defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4331counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4332
4333@smallexample
4334@group
4335SECTIONS
4336 @{
4337 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4338 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4339 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4340 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4341 .bss 0x3000 :
4342 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4343@}
4344@end group
4345@end smallexample
4346
4347The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4348this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4349the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4350how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4351script.
4352
4353@smallexample
4354@group
4355extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4356char *src = &_etext;
4357char *dst = &_data;
4358
4359/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4360while (dst < &_edata) @{
4361 *dst++ = *src++;
4362@}
4363
4364/* Zero bss */
4365for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4366 *dst = 0;
4367@end group
4368@end smallexample
4369
bbf115d3
L
4370@node Forced Output Alignment
4371@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4372@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4373@cindex forcing output section alignment
4374@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4375You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4376
7e7d5768
AM
4377@node Forced Input Alignment
4378@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4379@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4380@cindex forcing input section alignment
4381@cindex input section alignment
4382You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4383SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4384sections, whether larger or smaller.
4385
0c71d759
NC
4386@node Output Section Constraint
4387@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4388@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4389@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4390@cindex constraints on output sections
4391You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4392of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4393read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4394@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4395
252b5132 4396@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4397@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4398@kindex >@var{region}
4399@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4400@cindex memory regions and sections
4401You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4402using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4403
4404Here is a simple example:
4405@smallexample
4406@group
4407MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4408SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4409@end group
4410@end smallexample
4411
4412@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4413@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4414@kindex :@var{phdr}
4415@cindex section, assigning to program header
4416@cindex program headers and sections
4417You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4418using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4419one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4420assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4421@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4422linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4423
4424Here is a simple example:
4425@smallexample
4426@group
4427PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4428SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4429@end group
4430@end smallexample
4431
4432@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4433@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4434@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4435@cindex section fill pattern
4436@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4437You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4438@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4439(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4440within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4441alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4442necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4443of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4444an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4445fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4446other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4447pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4448expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4449
4450You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4451output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4452
4453Here is a simple example:
4454@smallexample
4455@group
563e308f 4456SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4457@end group
4458@end smallexample
4459
4460@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4461@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4462@kindex OVERLAY
4463@cindex overlays
4464An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4465are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4466the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4467copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4468required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4469can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4470than another.
4471
4472Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4473@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4474output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4475command is as follows:
4476@smallexample
4477@group
4478OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4479 @{
4480 @var{secname1}
4481 @{
4482 @var{output-section-command}
4483 @var{output-section-command}
4484 @dots{}
4485 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4486 @var{secname2}
4487 @{
4488 @var{output-section-command}
4489 @var{output-section-command}
4490 @dots{}
4491 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4492 @dots{}
4493 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4494@end group
4495@end smallexample
4496
4497Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4498section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4499section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4500those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4501except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4502sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4503
4504The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4505addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4506memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4507whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4508and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4509and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4510
4511If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4512among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4513all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4514section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4515NOCROSSREFS}.
4516
4517For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4518provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4519defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4520@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4521the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4522within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4523symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4524
4525At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4526the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4527
4528Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4529@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4530@smallexample
4531@group
4532 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4533 @{
4534 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4535 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4536 @}
4537@end group
4538@end smallexample
4539@noindent
4540This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4541address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4542@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4543following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4544@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4545@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4546
4547C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4548like the following.
4549
4550@smallexample
4551@group
4552 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4553 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4554 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4555@end group
4556@end smallexample
4557
4558Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4559everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4560example could have been written identically as follows.
4561
4562@smallexample
4563@group
4564 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4565 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4566 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4567 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4568 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4569 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4570 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4571@end group
4572@end smallexample
4573
4574@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4575@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4576@kindex MEMORY
4577@cindex memory regions
4578@cindex regions of memory
4579@cindex allocating memory
4580@cindex discontinuous memory
4581The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4582memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4583
4584The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4585memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4586may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4587can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4588set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4589regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4590around to fit into the available regions.
4591
4592A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4593command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4594you wish. The syntax is:
4595@smallexample
4596@group
a1ab1d2a 4597MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4598 @{
4599 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4600 @dots{}
4601 @}
4602@end group
4603@end smallexample
4604
4605The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4606region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4607Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4608with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4609must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4610add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4611command.
252b5132
RH
4612
4613@cindex memory region attributes
4614The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4615whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4616not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4617@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4618section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4619the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4620them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4621
4622The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4623@table @samp
4624@item R
4625Read-only section
4626@item W
4627Read/write section
4628@item X
4629Executable section
4630@item A
4631Allocatable section
4632@item I
4633Initialized section
4634@item L
4635Same as @samp{I}
4636@item !
4637Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4638@end table
4639
4640If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4641@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4642attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4643in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4644attributes.
4645
4646@kindex ORIGIN =
4647@kindex o =
4648@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4649The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4650the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4651cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4652abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4653@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4654
4655@kindex LENGTH =
4656@kindex len =
4657@kindex l =
4658The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4659region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4660be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4661@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4662
4663In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4664available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4665and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4666linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4667is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4668or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4669explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4670region.
4671
4672@smallexample
4673@group
a1ab1d2a 4674MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4675 @{
4676 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4677 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4678 @}
4679@end group
4680@end smallexample
4681
4682Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4683specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4684@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4685a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4686output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4687was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4688the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4689output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4690region, the linker will issue an error message.
4691
3ec57632 4692It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4693expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4694@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4695
4696@smallexample
4697@group
c0065db7 4698 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4699@end group
4700@end smallexample
4701
252b5132
RH
4702@node PHDRS
4703@section PHDRS Command
4704@kindex PHDRS
4705@cindex program headers
4706@cindex ELF program headers
4707@cindex program segments
4708@cindex segments, ELF
4709The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4710@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4711loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4712program with the @samp{-p} option.
4713
4714When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4715reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4716program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4717This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4718interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4719
4720The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4721in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4722precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4723the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4724not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4725
4726The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4727generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4728ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4729
4730This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4731@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4732
4733@smallexample
4734@group
4735PHDRS
4736@{
4737 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4738 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4739@}
4740@end group
4741@end smallexample
4742
4743The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4744of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4745header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4746with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4747must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4748is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4749
4750Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4751system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4752specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4753sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4754attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4755Section Phdr}.
4756
4757It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4758merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4759repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4760contain the section.
4761
4762If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4763then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4764not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4765convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4766placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4767default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4768segment at all.
4769
4770@kindex FILEHDR
4771@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4772You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4773the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4774The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4775file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4776include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4777segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4778these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4779
4780The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4781value of the keyword.
4782
4783@table @asis
4784@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4785Indicates an unused program header.
4786
4787@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4788Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4789the file.
4790
4791@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4792Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4793
4794@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4795Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4796found.
4797
4798@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4799Indicates a segment holding note information.
4800
4801@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4802A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4803ABI.
4804
4805@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4806Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4807
4808@item @var{expression}
4809An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4810be used for types not defined above.
4811@end table
4812
4813You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4814in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4815@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4816Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4817output section attribute.
4818
4819The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4820which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4821explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4822an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4823header.
4824
4825Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4826headers used on a native ELF system.
4827
4828@example
4829@group
4830PHDRS
4831@{
4832 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4833 interp PT_INTERP ;
4834 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4835 data PT_LOAD ;
4836 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4837@}
4838
4839SECTIONS
4840@{
4841 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4842 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4843 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4844 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4845 @dots{}
4846 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4847 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4848 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4849 @dots{}
4850@}
4851@end group
4852@end example
4853
4854@node VERSION
4855@section VERSION Command
4856@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4857@cindex symbol versions
4858@cindex version script
4859@cindex versions of symbols
4860The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4861only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4862symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4863a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4864shared library.
4865
4866You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4867you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4868also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4869
4870The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4871@smallexample
4872VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4873@end smallexample
4874
4875The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4876Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4877version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4878version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4879version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4880scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4881library.
4882
4883The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4884examples.
4885
4886@smallexample
4887VERS_1.1 @{
4888 global:
4889 foo1;
4890 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4891 old*;
4892 original*;
4893 new*;
252b5132
RH
4894@};
4895
4896VERS_1.2 @{
4897 foo2;
4898@} VERS_1.1;
4899
4900VERS_2.0 @{
4901 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4902 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4903 ns::*;
4904 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4905 @}
252b5132
RH
4906@} VERS_1.2;
4907@end smallexample
4908
4909This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4910version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4911The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4912a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4913of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4914symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4915is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4916in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4917However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4918name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4919
4920Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4921depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4922to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4923
4924Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4925depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4926and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4927
4928When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4929specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4930unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4931unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4932somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4933wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4934wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4935set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4936ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4937
4938The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4939they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4940could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4941However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4942
0f6bf451 4943Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4944in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4945symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4946won't.
4947
4948@smallexample
7c9c73be 4949@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4950@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4951
252b5132
RH
4952When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4953symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4954requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4955shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4956loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4957linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4958application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4959way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4960all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4961search for each symbol reference.
4962
4963The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4964doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4965that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4966functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4967the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4968required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4969that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4970versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4971the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4972
4973There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4974first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4975source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4976script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4977maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4978@smallexample
4979__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4980@end smallexample
4981@noindent
4982in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4983be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4984The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4985@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4986takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4987
4988The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4989function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4990an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4991version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4992linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4993
4994To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4995source file. Here is an example:
4996
4997@smallexample
4998__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4999__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5000__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5001__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5002@end smallexample
5003
5004In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5005unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5006example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5007@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5008
5009When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5010some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5011this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5012@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5013declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5014you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5015
5016If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5017within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5018(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5019specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5020
cb840a31
L
5021You can also specify the language in the version script:
5022
5023@smallexample
5024VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5025@end smallexample
5026
c0065db7 5027The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5028The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5029demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5030patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
5031
86043bbb
MM
5032Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5033described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5034or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5035the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5036whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5037cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5038might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5039should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5040expect when you upgrade.
5041
252b5132
RH
5042@node Expressions
5043@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5044@cindex expressions
5045@cindex arithmetic
5046The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5047that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5048expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5049host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5050
5051You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5052
5053The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5054expressions.
5055
5056@menu
5057* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5058* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5059* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5060* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5061* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5062* Operators:: Operators
5063* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5064* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5065* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5066@end menu
5067
5068@node Constants
5069@subsection Constants
5070@cindex integer notation
5071@cindex constants in linker scripts
5072All constants are integers.
5073
5074As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5075octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5076hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5077@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5078@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5079value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5080
5081@cindex scaled integers
5082@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5083@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5084@cindex suffixes for integers
5085@cindex integer suffixes
5086In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5087constant by
5088@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5089@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5090@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5091@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5092@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5093@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5094@tex
5095${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5096@end tex
5097@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5098respectively. For example, the following
5099all refer to the same quantity:
5100
252b5132 5101@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5102_fourk_1 = 4K;
5103_fourk_2 = 4096;
5104_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5105_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5106@end smallexample
5107
8a308ae8
NC
5108Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5109conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5110
0c71d759
NC
5111@node Symbolic Constants
5112@subsection Symbolic Constants
5113@cindex symbolic constants
5114@kindex CONSTANT
5115It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5116the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5117
5118@table @code
5119@item MAXPAGESIZE
5120@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5121The target's maximum page size.
5122
5123@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5124@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5125The target's default page size.
5126@end table
5127
5128So for example:
5129
5130@smallexample
5131 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5132@end smallexample
5133
5134will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5135supported by the target.
5136
252b5132
RH
5137@node Symbols
5138@subsection Symbol Names
5139@cindex symbol names
5140@cindex names
5141@cindex quoted symbol names
5142@kindex "
5143Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5144and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5145Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5146specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5147keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5148@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5149"SECTION" = 9;
5150"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5151@end smallexample
5152
5153Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5154to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5155whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5156
ecca9871
L
5157@node Orphan Sections
5158@subsection Orphan Sections
5159@cindex orphan
5160Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5161are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5162script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5163output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5164placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5165attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5166same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5167If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5168at the end of the file.
5169
5170For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5171well as section flag.
5172
41911f68 5173If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5174the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5175__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5176section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5177orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5178representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5179character.
5180
252b5132
RH
5181@node Location Counter
5182@subsection The Location Counter
5183@kindex .
5184@cindex dot
5185@cindex location counter
5186@cindex current output location
5187The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5188current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5189location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5190within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5191anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5192
5193@cindex holes
5194Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5195moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5196location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5197and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5198doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5199
5200@smallexample
5201SECTIONS
5202@{
5203 output :
5204 @{
5205 file1(.text)
5206 . = . + 1000;
5207 file2(.text)
5208 . += 1000;
5209 file3(.text)
563e308f 5210 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5211@}
5212@end smallexample
5213@noindent
5214In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5215located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5216followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5217@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5218@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5219specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5220
5c6bbab8
NC
5221@cindex dot inside sections
5222Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5223current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5224statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5225absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5226however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5227not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5228
5229@smallexample
5230SECTIONS
5231@{
5232 . = 0x100
5233 .text: @{
5234 *(.text)
5235 . = 0x200
5236 @}
5237 . = 0x500
5238 .data: @{
5239 *(.data)
5240 . += 0x600
5241 @}
5242@}
5243@end smallexample
5244
5245The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5246and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5247the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5248much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5249move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5250and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5251the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5252the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5253
b5666f2f
AM
5254@cindex dot outside sections
5255Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5256output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5257needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5258
5259@smallexample
5260SECTIONS
5261@{
5262 start_of_text = . ;
5263 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5264 end_of_text = . ;
5265
5266 start_of_data = . ;
5267 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5268 end_of_data = . ;
5269@}
5270@end smallexample
5271
5272If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5273not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5274between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5275should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5276blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5277the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5278sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5279statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5280special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5281place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5282as follows:
5283
5284@smallexample
5285SECTIONS
5286@{
5287 start_of_text = . ;
5288 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5289 end_of_text = . ;
5290
5291 start_of_data = . ;
5292 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5293 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5294 end_of_data = . ;
5295@}
5296@end smallexample
5297
5298This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5299@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5300placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5301assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5302a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5303section. So you could write:
5304
5305@smallexample
5306SECTIONS
5307@{
5308 start_of_text = . ;
5309 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5310 end_of_text = . ;
5311
5312 . = . ;
5313 start_of_data = . ;
5314 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5315 end_of_data = . ;
5316@}
5317@end smallexample
5318
5319Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5320@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5321
252b5132
RH
5322@need 2000
5323@node Operators
5324@subsection Operators
5325@cindex operators for arithmetic
5326@cindex arithmetic operators
5327@cindex precedence in expressions
5328The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5329the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5330@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5331@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5332@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5333@smallexample
5334precedence associativity Operators Notes
5335(highest)
53361 left ! - ~ (1)
53372 left * / %
53383 left + -
53394 left >> <<
53405 left == != > < <= >=
53416 left &
53427 left |
53438 left &&
53449 left ||
534510 right ? :
534611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5347(lowest)
5348@end smallexample
5349Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5350(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5351(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5352@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5353@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5354@tex
5355\vskip \baselineskip
5356%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5357\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5358\hrule
5359\halign
5360{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5361height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5362&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5363height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5364\noalign{\hrule}
5365height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5366&highest&&&&&\cr
5367% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5368&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5369&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5370&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5371&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5372&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5373&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5374&7&&left&&|&\cr
5375&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5376&9&&left&&||&\cr
5377&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5378&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5379&lowest&&&&&\cr
5380height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5381\hrule}
5382@end tex
5383@iftex
5384{
5385@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5386@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5387@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5388}
5389@end iftex
5390@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5391
5392@node Evaluation
5393@subsection Evaluation
5394@cindex lazy evaluation
5395@cindex expression evaluation order
5396The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5397an expression when absolutely necessary.
5398
5399The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5400address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5401regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5402as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5403
5404However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5405until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5406other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5407for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5408
5409The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5410assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5411allocation.
5412
5413Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5414@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5415
5416If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5417available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5418following
5419@smallexample
5420@group
5421SECTIONS
5422 @{
a1ab1d2a 5423 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5424 @{ *(.text) @}
5425 @}
5426@end group
5427@end smallexample
5428@noindent
5429will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5430address}.
5431
5432@node Expression Section
5433@subsection The Section of an Expression
5434@cindex expression sections
5435@cindex absolute expressions
5436@cindex relative expressions
5437@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5438@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5439@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5440When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5441or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5442fixed offset from the base of a section.
5443
5444The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5445whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5446an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5447section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5448
5449A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5450relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5451further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5452section will be the section of the relative expression.
5453
5454A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5455through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5456will not have any particular associated section.
5457
5458You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5459to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5460create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5461section @samp{.data}:
5462@smallexample
5463SECTIONS
5464 @{
5465 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5466 @}
5467@end smallexample
5468@noindent
5469If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5470@samp{.data} section.
5471
5472@node Builtin Functions
5473@subsection Builtin Functions
5474@cindex functions in expressions
5475The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5476use in linker script expressions.
5477
5478@table @code
5479@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5480@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5481@cindex expression, absolute
5482Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5483of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5484value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5485normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5486
5487@item ADDR(@var{section})
5488@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5489@cindex section address in expression
5490Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5491script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5492the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5493identical values:
5494@smallexample
5495@group
5496SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5497 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5498 @{
252b5132
RH
5499 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5500 @dots{}
5501 @}
5502 .output :
5503 @{
5504 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5505 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5506 @}
5507@dots{} @}
5508@end group
5509@end smallexample
5510
876f4090
NS
5511@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5512@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5513@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5514@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5515@cindex round up location counter
5516@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5517@cindex round up expression
5518@cindex align expression
5519Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5520to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5521doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5522arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5523expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5524equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5525
5526Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5527next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5528variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5529input sections:
252b5132
RH
5530@smallexample
5531@group
5532SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5533 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5534 *(.data)
5535 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5536 @}
5537@dots{} @}
5538@end group
5539@end smallexample
5540@noindent
5541The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5542a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5543a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5544of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5545
5546The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5547
362c1d1a
NS
5548@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5549@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5550@cindex section alignment
5551Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5552been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5553evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5554the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5555value in that section.
5556@smallexample
5557@group
5558SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5559 .output @{
5560 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5561 @dots{}
5562 @}
5563@dots{} @}
5564@end group
5565@end smallexample
5566
252b5132
RH
5567@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5568@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5569This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5570scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5571section.
5572
2d20f7bf
JJ
5573@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5574@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5575This is equivalent to either
5576@smallexample
5577(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5578@end smallexample
5579or
5580@smallexample
5581(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5582@end smallexample
5583@noindent
5584depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5585for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5586@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5587If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5588memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5589bytes in the on-disk file.
5590
5591This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5592any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5593@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5594be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5595working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5596
5597@noindent
5598Example:
5599@smallexample
5600 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5601@end smallexample
5602
5603@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5604@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5605This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5606evaluation purposes.
5607
5608@smallexample
5609 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5610@end smallexample
5611
a4f5ad88
JJ
5612@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5613@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5614This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5615@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5616When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5617does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5618@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5619boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5620it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5621@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5622
5623@smallexample
5624 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5625@end smallexample
5626
252b5132
RH
5627@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5628@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5629@cindex symbol defaults
5630Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5631defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5632return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5633default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5634shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5635the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5636existed, its value is preserved:
5637
5638@smallexample
5639@group
5640SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5641 .text : @{
5642 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5643 @dots{}
5644 @}
5645 @dots{}
5646@}
5647@end group
5648@end smallexample
5649
3ec57632
NC
5650@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5651@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5652Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5653
252b5132
RH
5654@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5655@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5656@cindex section load address in expression
5657Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5658the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5659attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5660Section LMA}).
5661
5662@kindex MAX
5663@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5664Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5665
5666@kindex MIN
5667@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5668Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5669
5670@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5671@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5672@cindex unallocated address, next
5673Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5674This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5675use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5676output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5677
3ec57632
NC
5678@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5679@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5680Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5681
ba916c8a
MM
5682@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5683@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5684Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5685value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5686option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5687@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5688be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5689``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5690name.
5691
252b5132
RH
5692@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5693@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5694@cindex section size
5695Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5696been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5697evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5698@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5699@smallexample
5700@group
5701SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5702 .output @{
5703 .start = . ;
5704 @dots{}
5705 .end = . ;
5706 @}
5707 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5708 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5709@dots{} @}
5710@end group
5711@end smallexample
5712
5713@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5714@itemx sizeof_headers
5715@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5716@cindex header size
5717Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5718information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5719this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5720choose, to facilitate paging.
5721
5722@cindex not enough room for program headers
5723@cindex program headers, not enough room
5724When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5725@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5726number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5727addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5728additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5729room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5730the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5731script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5732you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5733command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5734@end table
5735
5736@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5737@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5738@cindex implicit linker scripts
5739If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5740an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5741linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5742linker will report an error.
5743
5744An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5745
5746Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5747assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5748commands.
5749
5750Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5751at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5752read. This can affect archive searching.
5753
5754@ifset GENERIC
5755@node Machine Dependent
5756@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5757
5758@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5759@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5760sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5761functionality are not listed.
5762
5763@menu
36f63dca
NC
5764@ifset H8300
5765* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5766@end ifset
5767@ifset I960
5768* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5769@end ifset
5770@ifset ARM
5771* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5772@end ifset
5773@ifset HPPA
5774* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5775@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5776@ifset M68K
5777* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5778@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5779@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5780* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5781@end ifset
2469cfa2 5782@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5783* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5784@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5785@ifset M68HC11
5786* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5787@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5788@ifset POWERPC
5789* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5790@end ifset
5791@ifset POWERPC64
5792* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5793@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5794@ifset SPU
5795* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5796@end ifset
74459f0e 5797@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5798* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5799@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5800@ifset WIN32
5801* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5802@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5803@ifset XTENSA
5804* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5805@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5806@end menu
5807@end ifset
5808
252b5132
RH
5809@ifset H8300
5810@ifclear GENERIC
5811@raisesections
5812@end ifclear
5813
5814@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5815@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5816
5817@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5818For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5819you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5820
5821@table @emph
5822@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5823@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5824@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5825targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5826program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5827respectively.
5828
5829@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5830@item synthesizing instructions
5831@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5832@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5833sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5834page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5835(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5836@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5837top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5838
5839@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5840@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5841biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5842which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5843page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5844(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5845@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5846the top page of memory).
5847
5848@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5849@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
585032 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5851changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5852(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5853@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5854the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5855@end table
5856
5857@ifclear GENERIC
5858@lowersections
5859@end ifclear
5860@end ifset
5861
36f63dca 5862@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5863@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5864@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5865@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5866@node Renesas
5867@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5868
c2dcd04e
NC
5869@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5870H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5871options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5872@end ifset
5873@end ifclear
5874
5875@ifset I960
5876@ifclear GENERIC
5877@raisesections
5878@end ifclear
5879
5880@node i960
5881@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5882
5883@cindex i960 support
5884
5885You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5886specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5887family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5888incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5889linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5890libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5891search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5892
5893For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5894well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5895paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5896the names
5897
5898@smallexample
5899@group
5900try
5901libtry.a
5902tryca
5903libtryca.a
5904@end group
5905@end smallexample
5906
5907@noindent
5908The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5909two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5910
5911You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5912the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5913use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5914specifies a library.
5915
5916@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5917@cindex relaxing on i960
5918@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5919you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5920@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5921them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5922instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5923instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5924target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5925not itself call any subroutines).
5926
48229727
JB
5927@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
5928@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
5929@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
5930The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
5931
5932The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
5933
36f63dca
NC
5934@ifclear GENERIC
5935@lowersections
5936@end ifclear
5937@end ifset
5938
5939@ifset ARM
5940@ifclear GENERIC
5941@raisesections
5942@end ifclear
5943
93fd0973
SC
5944@ifset M68HC11
5945@ifclear GENERIC
5946@raisesections
5947@end ifclear
5948
5949@node M68HC11/68HC12
5950@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5951
5952@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5953
5954@subsection Linker Relaxation
5955
5956For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5957optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5958
5959@table @emph
5960@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5961@item relaxing address modes
5962@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5963targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5964program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5965respectively.
5966
5967@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5968transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5969page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5970
5971@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5972When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5973of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5974addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5975@code{bset} instructions.
5976
5977@end table
5978
5979@subsection Trampoline Generation
5980
5981@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5982@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5983For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5984call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5985will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5986trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5987case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5988point to the function trampoline.
5989
5990@ifclear GENERIC
5991@lowersections
5992@end ifclear
5993@end ifset
5994
36f63dca 5995@node ARM
3674e28a 5996@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5997
5998@cindex ARM interworking support
5999@kindex --support-old-code
6000For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6001between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6002been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6003line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6004libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6005option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6006given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6007which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6008the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6009non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6010
6011@cindex thumb entry point
6012@cindex entry point, thumb
6013@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6014The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6015@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6016But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6017branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6018executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6019
ce11ba6c
KT
6020@cindex PE import table prefixing
6021@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6022The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6023the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6024elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6025import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6026
e489d0ae
PB
6027@cindex BE8
6028@kindex --be8
6029The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6030executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6031The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6032
3674e28a
PB
6033@cindex TARGET1
6034@kindex --target1-rel
6035@kindex --target1-abs
6036The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6037@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6038or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6039and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6040
6041@cindex TARGET2
6042@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6043The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6044@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6045meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6046@table @samp
6047@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6048@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6049@item abs
6050@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6051@item got-rel
6052@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6053@end table
6054
319850b4
JB
6055@cindex FIX_V4BX
6056@kindex --fix-v4bx
6057The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6058specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6059interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6060also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6061
6062In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6063linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6064@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6065
6066In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6067relocations are ignored.
6068
845b51d6
PB
6069@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6070@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6071Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6072relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6073
6074@smallexample
6075TST rM, #1
6076MOVEQ PC, rM
6077BX Rn
6078@end smallexample
6079
6080This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6081and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6082condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6083
33bfe774
JB
6084@cindex USE_BLX
6085@kindex --use-blx
6086The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6087BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6088situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6089code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6090each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6091
6092This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6093specify it if you are using that target.
6094
c6dd86c6
JB
6095@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6096@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6097The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6098bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6099instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6100to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6101the support code can read the intended values.
6102
6103The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6104intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6105and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6106intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6107full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6108you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6109
6110If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6111enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6112@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6113mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6114vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6115@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6116
6117If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6118potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6119such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6120first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6121instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6122the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6123are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6124
bf21ed78
MS
6125@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6126@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6127The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6128warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6129enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6130linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6131using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6132not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6133
6134@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6135@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6136The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6137warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6138@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6139linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6140using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6141
726150b7
NC
6142@cindex PIC_VENEER
6143@kindex --pic-veneer
6144The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6145ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6146is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6147@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6148
6149@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6150@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6151The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6152code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6153perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6154placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6155controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6156The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6157duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6158group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6159code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6160where they should be placed.
6161
6162The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6163@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6164placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6165branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6166placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6167value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6168exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6169A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6170linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6171from the input sections.
6172
6173The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6174@samp{N = +1}.
6175
1a51c1a4
NC
6176Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6177only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6178otherwise.
6179
36f63dca
NC
6180@ifclear GENERIC
6181@lowersections
6182@end ifclear
6183@end ifset
6184
6185@ifset HPPA
6186@ifclear GENERIC
6187@raisesections
6188@end ifclear
6189
6190@node HPPA ELF32
6191@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6192@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6193@kindex --multi-subspace
6194When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6195import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6196The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6197stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6198multiple sub-spaces.
6199
6200@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6201@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6202Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6203stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6204@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6205sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6206a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6207the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6208conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6209prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6210A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6211branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6212@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6213@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6214detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6215positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6216
6217Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6218single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6219create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6220large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6221
6222@ifclear GENERIC
6223@lowersections
6224@end ifclear
6225@end ifset
6226
7fb9f789
NC
6227@ifset M68K
6228@ifclear GENERIC
6229@raisesections
6230@end ifclear
6231
6232@node M68K
6233@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6234
6235@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6236@kindex --got=@var{type}
6237The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6238The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6239@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6240the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6241@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6242entries only at non-negative offsets.
6243@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6244entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6245support such GOTs.
6246@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6247output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6248file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6249files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6250
6251@ifclear GENERIC
6252@lowersections
6253@end ifclear
6254@end ifset
6255
36f63dca
NC
6256@ifset MMIX
6257@ifclear GENERIC
6258@raisesections
6259@end ifclear
6260
6261@node MMIX
6262@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6263For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6264@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6265understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6266can translate between the two formats.
6267
6268There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6269Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6270registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6271equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6272@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6273global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6274this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6275symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6276
7a2de473
HPN
6277Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6278@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6279The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6280of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6281
6282Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6283are left out from an mmo file.
6284
6285@ifclear GENERIC
6286@lowersections
6287@end ifclear
6288@end ifset
6289
6290@ifset MSP430
6291@ifclear GENERIC
6292@raisesections
6293@end ifclear
6294
6295@node MSP430
6296@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6297For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6298will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6299just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6300
6301@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6302The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6303
6304@table @code
6305@item @samp{.vectors}
6306Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6307
6308@item @samp{.bootloader}
6309Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6310in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6311
6312@item @samp{.infomem}
6313Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6314this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6315
c0065db7 6316@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6317This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6318in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6319
6320@item @samp{.noinit}
6321Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6322
c0065db7 6323The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6324@end table
6325
6326@ifclear GENERIC
6327@lowersections
6328@end ifclear
6329@end ifset
6330
2a60a7a8
AM
6331@ifset POWERPC
6332@ifclear GENERIC
6333@raisesections
6334@end ifclear
6335
6336@node PowerPC ELF32
6337@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6338@cindex PowerPC long branches
6339@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6340Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6341displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6342@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6343@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6344the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6345section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6346section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6347@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6348both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6349considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6350
6351@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6352@table @option
6353@cindex PowerPC PLT
6354@kindex --bss-plt
6355@item --bss-plt
6356Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6357generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6358the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6359writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6360@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6361PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6362compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6363BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6364
016687f8
AM
6365@kindex --secure-plt
6366@item --secure-plt
6367@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6368@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6369when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6370layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6371style BSS PLT.
6372
2a60a7a8
AM
6373@cindex PowerPC GOT
6374@kindex --sdata-got
6375@item --sdata-got
6376The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6377sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6378@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6379section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6380@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6381@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6382@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6383@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6384PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6385pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6386GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6387really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6388
6389@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6390@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6391@item --emit-stub-syms
6392This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6393symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6394
6395@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6396@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6397@item --no-tls-optimize
6398PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6399sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6400disable the optimization.
6401@end table
6402
6403@ifclear GENERIC
6404@lowersections
6405@end ifclear
6406@end ifset
6407
6408@ifset POWERPC64
6409@ifclear GENERIC
6410@raisesections
6411@end ifclear
6412
6413@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6414@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6415
6416@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6417@table @option
6418@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6419@kindex --stub-group-size
6420@item --stub-group-size
6421Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6422by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6423@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6424sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6425a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6426the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6427conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6428prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6429A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6430branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6431@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6432@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6433detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6434positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6435
6436Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6437single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6438create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6439large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6440
6441@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6442@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6443@item --emit-stub-syms
6444This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6445symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6446
6447@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6448@kindex --dotsyms
6449@kindex --no-dotsyms
6450@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6451These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6452in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6453function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6454code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6455properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6456to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6457@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6458dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6459feature.
6460
6461@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6462@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6463@item --no-tls-optimize
6464PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6465sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6466disable the optimization.
6467
6468@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6469@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6470@item --no-opd-optimize
6471PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6472corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6473the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6474Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6475
6476@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6477@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6478@item --non-overlapping-opd
6479Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6480@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6481the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6482entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6483
6484@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6485@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6486@item --no-toc-optimize
6487PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6488entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6489reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6490marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6491marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6492relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6493unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6494reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6495discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6496reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6497code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6498optimization.
6499
6500@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6501@kindex --no-multi-toc
6502@item --no-multi-toc
6503By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6504entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6505total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6506grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6507TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6508calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6509help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
651064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6511Use this option to turn off this feature.
6512@end table
6513
6514@ifclear GENERIC
6515@lowersections
6516@end ifclear
6517@end ifset
6518
49fa1e15
AM
6519@ifset SPU
6520@ifclear GENERIC
6521@raisesections
6522@end ifclear
6523
6524@node SPU ELF
6525@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6526
6527@cindex SPU ELF options
6528@table @option
6529
6530@cindex SPU plugins
6531@kindex --plugin
6532@item --plugin
6533This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6534
6535@cindex SPU overlays
6536@kindex --no-overlays
6537@item --no-overlays
6538Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6539regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6540@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6541turns off all this special overlay handling.
6542
6543@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6544@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6545@item --emit-stub-syms
6546This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6547symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6548
6549@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6550@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6551@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6552This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6553function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6554on calls to non-overlay regions.
6555
6556@cindex SPU local store size
6557@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6558@item --local-store=lo:hi
6559@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6560the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6561range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6562
c0065db7 6563@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6564@kindex --stack-analysis
6565@item --stack-analysis
6566SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6567unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6568under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6569@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6570@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6571determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6572for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6573for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6574for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6575find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6576and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6577under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6578dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6579is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6580and calls will be given.
6581
c0065db7 6582@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6583@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6584@item --emit-stack-syms
6585This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6586in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6587These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6588functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6589functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6590such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6591The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6592@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6593@end table
6594
6595@ifclear GENERIC
6596@lowersections
6597@end ifclear
6598@end ifset
6599
36f63dca
NC
6600@ifset TICOFF
6601@ifclear GENERIC
6602@raisesections
6603@end ifclear
6604
6605@node TI COFF
6606@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6607@cindex TI COFF versions
6608@kindex --format=@var{version}
6609The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6610TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6611also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6612format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6613header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6614
6615@ifclear GENERIC
6616@lowersections
6617@end ifclear
6618@end ifset
6619
2ca22b03
NC
6620@ifset WIN32
6621@ifclear GENERIC
6622@raisesections
6623@end ifclear
6624
6625@node WIN32
6626@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6627
c0065db7 6628This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6629See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6630command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6631
6632@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6633@cindex import libraries
6634@item import libraries
69da35b5 6635The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6636libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6637regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6638archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6639support for creating such libraries provided with the
6640@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6641
c0065db7
RM
6642@item exporting DLL symbols
6643@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6644The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6645
6646@table @emph
6647@item using auto-export functionality
6648@cindex using auto-export functionality
6649By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6650which is controlled by the following command line options:
6651
0a5d968e
NC
6652@itemize
6653@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6654@item --exclude-symbols
6655@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6656@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6657@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6658@end itemize
6659
09e2aba4
DK
6660When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6661(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6662symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6663often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6664private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6665options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6666exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6667final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6668
6669If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6670command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6671if either of the following are true:
6672
6673@itemize
6674@item A DEF file is used.
6675@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6676@end itemize
dc8465bf 6677
c0065db7
RM
6678@item using a DEF file
6679@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6680Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6681an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6682exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6683name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6684command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6685
6686@example
6687gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6688@end example
6689
0a5d968e
NC
6690Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6691@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6692
dc8465bf
NC
6693Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6694
6695@example
4b5bd4e7 6696LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6697
6698EXPORTS
6699foo
6700bar
6701_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6702another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6703var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6704doo = foo == foo2
6705eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6706@end example
dc8465bf 6707
7fcab871 6708This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6709symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6710alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6711by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6712@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6713@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6714export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6715in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6716symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6717
6b31ad16
DS
6718The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6719name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6720the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6721
b45619c0
NC
6722When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6723library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6724@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6725executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6726
6727With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6728specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6729non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6730
6731If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6732or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6733filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6734
4b5bd4e7
DS
6735The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6736
6737@example
6738EXPORTS
6739 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6740 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6741 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6742@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6743
6744Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6745@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6746@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6747@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6748Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6749@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6750string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6751
6752The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6753
6754@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6755will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6756by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6757linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6758library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6759
6760@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6761The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6762the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6763@code{*_imp__foo}).
6764
6765@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6766well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6767read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6768variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6769the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6770extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6771application will behave unexpectedly.
6772
6773@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6774it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6775symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6776API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6777the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6778
4b5bd4e7
DS
6779See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6780other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6781
6782@cindex creating a DEF file
6783While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6784with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6785
6786@item Using decorations
6787@cindex Using decorations
6788Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6789itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6790declared as:
6791
6792@example
6793__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6794__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6795@end example
6796
6797All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6798any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6799this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6800the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6801
6802Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6803decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6804instead:
6805
6806@example
6807__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6808__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6809@end example
6810
c0065db7
RM
6811This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6812when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6813variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6814code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6815of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6816omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6817@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6818information.
c0065db7 6819@end table
dc8465bf 6820
2ca22b03
NC
6821@cindex automatic data imports
6822@item automatic data imports
6823The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6824by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6825compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6826issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6827code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6828c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6829initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6830decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6831platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6832command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6833The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6834suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6835trigger the feature's use.
6836
c0065db7 6837auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6838additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6839
c0065db7 6840"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6841documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6842
c0065db7
RM
6843The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6844occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6845One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6846below.
6847
6848@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6849For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6850object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6851offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6852field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6853in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6854without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6855The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6856references.
6857
c0065db7
RM
6858The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6859be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6860themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6861runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6862compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6863support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6864run without error on an older system.
6865
c0065db7
RM
6866@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6867enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6868
6869@cindex direct linking to a dll
6870@item direct linking to a dll
6871The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6872including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6873libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6874traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6875libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6876function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6877though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6878storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6879tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6880large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6881
c0065db7 6882Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6883@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6884of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6885perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6886select the dll instead of an import library.
6887
2ca22b03 6888
69da35b5
NC
6889For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6890to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6891
6892@example
45e948fe
NC
6893libxxx.dll.a
6894xxx.dll.a
6895libxxx.a
6896xxx.lib
69da35b5 6897cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6898libxxx.dll
6899xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6900@end example
6901
69da35b5
NC
6902before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6903
c0065db7
RM
6904(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6905where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6906@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6907file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6908@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6909
c0065db7
RM
6910Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6911@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6912was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6913various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6914could coexist on the same machine.
6915
2ca22b03
NC
6916The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6917applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6918libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6919
6920@example
6921bin/
6922 cygxxx.dll
6923lib/
6924 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6925 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6926@end example
6927
c0065db7
RM
6928Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6929done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6930
69311. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6932@example
6933gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6934@end example
2ca22b03 6935
69da35b5
NC
6936However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6937(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6938@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6939not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6940
2ca22b03
NC
69412. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6942directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6943should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6944making the app/dll.
6945
6946@example
6947ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6948@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6949
6950Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6951
6952@example
6953gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6954@end example
69da35b5
NC
6955
6956This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6957perfectly legal
6958
6959@example
6960bin/
6961 cygxxx-5.dll
6962lib/
c0065db7 6963 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6964@end example
6965
dc8465bf 6966Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6967even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6968@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6969
6970Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6971wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6972
69731. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6974work with auto-imported data.
6975
dc8465bf
NC
69762. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6977import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6978symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6979for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6980possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6981
45e948fe
NC
69823. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6983critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6984in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6985stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6986
69da35b5 6987So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6988true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6989a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6990binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6991massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6992requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6993will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6994
c0065db7 6995@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6996@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6997@item adding additional names
6998Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6999A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7000exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7001when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7002import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7003
c0065db7 7004@example
dc8465bf
NC
7005LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7006
7007EXPORTS
c0065db7 7008foo
dc8465bf 7009_foo = foo
c0065db7 7010@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7011
7012The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7013
7014Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7015source code using the "weak" attribute:
7016
c0065db7
RM
7017@example
7018void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7019void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7020@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7021
7022See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7023symbols.
7024
7025@item renaming symbols
7026Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7027kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7028@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7029DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7030created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7031
c0065db7 7032@example
dc8465bf
NC
7033LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7034
7035EXPORTS
7036_foo = foo
c0065db7 7037@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7038
7039The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7040@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7041@end table
dc8465bf 7042
0a5d968e 7043Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7044unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7045If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7046@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7047that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7048@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7049renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7050to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7051the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7052In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7053which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7054
7055@cindex weak externals
7056@item weak externals
7057The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7058weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7059defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7060are three variants of weak externals:
7061@itemize
7062@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7063called lazy externals.
7064@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7065This form is not presently implemented.
7066@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7067implemented.
7068@end itemize
7069As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7070are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7071uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7072
7073@cindex aligned common symbols
7074@item aligned common symbols
7075As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7076desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7077the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7078carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7079by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7080tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7081but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7082warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7083@end table
7084
7085@ifclear GENERIC
7086@lowersections
7087@end ifclear
7088@end ifset
7089
e0001a05
NC
7090@ifset XTENSA
7091@ifclear GENERIC
7092@raisesections
7093@end ifclear
7094
7095@node Xtensa
7096@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7097
7098@cindex Xtensa processors
7099The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7100@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7101specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7102keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7103example, with the command:
7104
7105@smallexample
7106SECTIONS
7107@{
7108 .text : @{
7109 *(.literal .text)
7110 @}
7111@}
7112@end smallexample
7113
7114@noindent
7115@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7116and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7117literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7118interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7119group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7120files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7121and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7122
43cd72b9 7123@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7124@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7125Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7126provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7127is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7128literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7129will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7130location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7131the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7132unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7133@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7134range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7135
7136For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7137to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7138instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7139instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7140instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7141@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7142hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7143By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7144switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7145density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7146instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7147performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7148linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7149a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7150
7151The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7152control the linker:
7153
7154@cindex Xtensa options
7155@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7156@item --size-opt
7157When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7158more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7159no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7160alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7161preserve the correctness of the code.
7162@end table
e0001a05
NC
7163
7164@ifclear GENERIC
7165@lowersections
7166@end ifclear
7167@end ifset
7168
252b5132
RH
7169@ifclear SingleFormat
7170@node BFD
7171@chapter BFD
7172
7173@cindex back end
7174@cindex object file management
7175@cindex object formats available
7176@kindex objdump -i
7177The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7178These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7179object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7180format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7181it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7182associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7183object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7184(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7185list all the formats available for your configuration.
7186
7187@cindex BFD requirements
7188@cindex requirements for BFD
7189As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7190several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7191BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7192formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7193been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7194BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7195may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7196
7197One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7198mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7199useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7200conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7201
7202@menu
7203* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7204@end menu
7205
7206@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7207@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7208@cindex opening object files
7209@include bfdsumm.texi
7210@end ifclear
7211
7212@node Reporting Bugs
7213@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7214@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7215@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7216
ff5dcc92 7217Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7218
7219Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7220it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7221to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7222work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7223@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7224
7225In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7226information that enables us to fix the bug.
7227
7228@menu
7229* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7230* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7231@end menu
7232
7233@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7234@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7235@cindex bug criteria
7236
7237If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7238
7239@itemize @bullet
7240@cindex fatal signal
7241@cindex linker crash
7242@cindex crash of linker
7243@item
7244If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7245@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7246
7247@cindex error on valid input
7248@item
ff5dcc92 7249If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7250
7251@cindex invalid input
7252@item
ff5dcc92 7253If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7254may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7255object files are correct.
7256
7257@item
7258If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7259improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7260@end itemize
7261
7262@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7263@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7264@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7265@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7266
7267A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7268products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7269recommend you contact that organization first.
7270
7271You can find contact information for many support companies and
7272individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7273distribution.
7274
ad22bfe8 7275@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7276Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7277@value{BUGURL}.
7278@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7279
7280The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7281@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7282fact or leave it out, state it!
7283
7284Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7285problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7286assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7287matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7288the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7289location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7290were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7291into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7292specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7293and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7294
7295Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7296the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7297on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7298
7299Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7300bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7301respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7302You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7303
7304To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7305
7306@itemize @bullet
7307@item
ff5dcc92 7308The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7309the @samp{--version} argument.
7310
7311Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7312the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7313
7314@item
ff5dcc92 7315Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7316patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7317
7318@item
7319The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7320version number.
7321
7322@item
ff5dcc92 7323What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7324``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7325
7326@item
7327The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7328observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7329list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7330sufficient.
7331
7332If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7333and then we might not encounter the bug.
7334
7335@item
7336A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7337bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7338provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7339bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7340state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7341requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7342we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7343attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7344
7345If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7346@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7347object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7348@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7349how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7350
7351@item
7352A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7353incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7354
ff5dcc92 7355Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7356will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7357not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7358a chance to make a mistake.
7359
7360Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7361say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7362copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7363C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7364and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7365fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7366you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7367any conclusion from our observations.
7368
7369@item
ff5dcc92 7370If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7371diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7372@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7373If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7374context, not by line number.
7375
7376The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7377sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7378@end itemize
7379
7380Here are some things that are not necessary:
7381
7382@itemize @bullet
7383@item
7384A description of the envelope of the bug.
7385
7386Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7387which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7388changes will not affect it.
7389
7390This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7391will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7392with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7393We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7394
7395Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7396of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7397output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7398less time, and so on.
7399
7400However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7401report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7402
7403@item
7404A patch for the bug.
7405
7406A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7407the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7408a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7409to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7410
ff5dcc92 7411Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7412construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7413through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7414able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7415fixed.
7416
7417And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7418patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7419help us to understand.
7420
7421@item
7422A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7423
7424Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7425things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7426@end itemize
7427
7428@node MRI
7429@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7430@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7431To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7432linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7433alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7434described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7435simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7436@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7437linker commands; these commands are described here.
7438
7439In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7440file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7441features to make use of them.
7442
7443You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7444@samp{-c} command-line option.
7445
7446Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7447command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7448blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7449MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7450issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7451
7452Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7453
7454You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7455lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7456The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7457
7458@table @code
7459@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7460@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7461@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7462Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7463the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7464@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7465your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7466script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7467commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7468input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7469@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7470
7471@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7472@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7473Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7474in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7475
7476@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7477
7478@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7479@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7480Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7481@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7482
7483@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7484@item BASE @var{expression}
7485Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7486absolute addresses) in the output file.
7487
7488@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7489@item CHIP @var{expression}
7490@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7491This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7492
7493@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7494@item END
7495This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7496
7497@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7498@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7499Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7500language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7501
7502@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7503@item
252b5132
RH
7504S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7505
7506@item
7507IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7508
7509@item
7510COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7511@samp{COFF}
7512@end enumerate
7513
7514@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7515@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7516Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7517@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7518
7519The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7520same line, with no change in its effect.
7521
7522@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7523@item LOAD @var{filename}
7524@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7525Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7526same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7527command line.
7528
7529@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7530@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7531@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7532MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7533option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7534
7535@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7536@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7537@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7538Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7539order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7540script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7541sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7542file, in the order specified.
7543
7544@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7545@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7546@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7547@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7548Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7549@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7550
7551@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7552@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7553@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7554@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7555You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7556specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7557If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7558@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7559@end table
7560
793c5807
NC
7561@node GNU Free Documentation License
7562@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7563@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7564
370b66a1
CD
7565@node LD Index
7566@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7567
7568@printindex cp
7569
7570@tex
7571% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7572% meantime:
7573\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7574\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7575\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7576\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7577\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7578\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7579\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7580\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7581\page\colophon
7582% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7583@end tex
7584
252b5132 7585@bye